Owners Manual
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
Chrysler Group LLC
11Y532-126-AA
Grand Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11Y532-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Caravan
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears stamped on
the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and
printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 29
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . 37
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . 43
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . 47
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 63
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 75
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 78
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Rear Seat Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles
Only) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children With
Seat Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . 100
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
11
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACCESSORY
— ON/RUN
— START
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
2
Emergency Key Removal
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and into the lock cylinder with either side up.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
15
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posia chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
position.
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
SENTRY KEY姞
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
or unlocked.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authoReplacement Keys
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
the authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
provides both audible and visible signals, for the first
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash
performed at an authorized dealer.
repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an additional
General Information
15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps and/or turn
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Rearming Of The System
subject to the following conditions:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
• This device must accept any interference that may be Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
received, including interference that may cause unde- disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
sired operation.
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors To Arm The System
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and door is open, or press the LOCK button on the Remote
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After all the doors are
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. The Vehicle Security
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set.
door the alarm will sound.
After the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
at a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle Security
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Alarm is armed.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continuvehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
ously during vehicle operation, have the system checked
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previby your authorized dealer.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
To Disarm The System
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
19
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transmitters, and those built with power options will be
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
Using the RKE Transmitter
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the
customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or
sound horn on LOCK.
21
Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. The Illuminated Entry
system also turns on.
Remote Key Unlock on First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitUnlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform- ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
ing the following steps:
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
vehicle.
Security Alarm.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
while still holding the LOCK button.
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
Fob removed.
Remote Open Window Feature
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
its previous setting.
lower completely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn with Remote Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
23
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
removed.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
its previous setting.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
following steps:
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
vehicle.
Alarm.
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
console.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
NOTE:
• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move armed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
noises of the system.
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
running.
Equipped
Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm.
25
Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
Equipped
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElecRKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnRKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforpower-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
mation.
position.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vevehicle.
hicle Security Alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Programming Additional Transmitters
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while contact your authorized dealer for details.
still holding the UNLOCK button.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
battery.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter NOTE:
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Fob removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Separating RKE Transmitter
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is approximately three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
29
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
2
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto• Vehicle theft alarm not active
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- cycle.
turely:
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted - Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted - Fuel Low
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• Remote Start Aborted - L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled - Start Vehicle To Reset
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
switch to the ON/RUN position.
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute NOTE:
cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON/RUN
position, otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of
15-minute cycle.
• The message “Remote Start Active — Key To Run”
will display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the
key to ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release • Any engine warning lights come on
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
• Fuel lamp turns on
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The hood is opened
When To Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
• The hazard switch is pressed
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
cycle
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset insert the
Mode
Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or the ON/RUN position.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
DOOR LOCKS
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote Manual Door Locks
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
2
Manual Door Lock
Sliding Door Lock
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave unattended children in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries or death.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Power Door Locks
35
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled
by your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not 4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition Key Fob from the
operate if there is any manual operation of the power OFF position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of
five times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start
door locks (lock or unlock).
the engine).
• On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic 5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings in the UNLOCK direction.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
been changed.
• On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
perform the following steps:
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
canceled before the feature could be changed. If neces2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will sary, repeat the previous procedure.
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be
programming procedure.)
reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure
or by performing the procedure in the EVIC, Customer3. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch.
Programmable Features on vehicles so equipped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
features in accordance with local laws.
2
WINDOWS
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
windows from the driver’s seat.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out all power windows by depressing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Driver’s Power Window Switches
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Power Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and locks and unlocks all doors. The switch will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position and during power accessory delay.
39
2
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Power Door Locks
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The front window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
NOTE:
part way and release it when you want the window to
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autostop.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
The power window switches remain active for up to
switch again to close the window.
10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting)
after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoAuto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
Equipped
first detent and hold to close window manually.
The front driver and front passenger switches may be
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
41
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
activated the Power Window Lockout.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open, sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backstopping several inches above the window sill.
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
43
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
lowing guidelines:
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
• Always open the door smoothly.
fuel door.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when openPower Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
The power sliding door may be opened or
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
closed manually or by using the buttons on the
the downhill direction.
RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your power sliding door handle will also power open or close
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding the power sliding door.
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
exterior handle.
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched closed manually.
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will
reverse direction.
Power Sliding Door Switch
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
is fully open and then press the switch again.
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstrucdisable the switches and handles for the rear seat passentions within the same cycle, the system will automatigers.
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
clicking sound until the door has no further moveNOTE:
• The power sliding side door switches will not open if
ment. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling
the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above
the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs,
0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with
no damage is done to the power sliding door motor.
the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph
The power sliding door must be opened or closed
(0 km/h), the brake must be pressed.
manually.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided
it meets sufficient resistance.
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for
12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
entering or exiting the vehicle.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
disabled by performing the following procedure:
overhead console.
1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the
2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
OFF position, the power sliding side door may not be
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start the
opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
engine).
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ- activating the inside power sliding door handle.
ARD switch ON.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
1 — Left Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Door
4 — Master Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
1. Open the sliding side door.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, al2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door
in the desired position.
Lock.
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
Child Protection Door Lock
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection
Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats,
press the ”ON” Master Lock Out Switch located in the
front overhead console, next to the driver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
49
NOTE:
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
overhead console, or the switches located on the trim
1. Open the sliding side door.
panel just in front of the power sliding door when the
shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
position.
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
LIFTGATE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
equipped).
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull power liftgate feature, pressing the button on the RKE
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked
for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the
liftgate area.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
Liftgate Handle Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
2
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button, and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. liftgate is opening or closing.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
1 — Left Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Door
4 — Master Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
(0 km/h).
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below ⫺12°F (⫺24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
liftgate buttons.
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
53
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
within the same cycle, the system will automatically Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) that span the front, second, and third row
seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
window
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), CHildren (LATCH).
which lock the seat belt webbing into position by
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
secure a large item in a seat
collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
55
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even you under normal conditions. However, in an accident
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
belts.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
WARNING!
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident.
61
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
allow the belt to retract fully.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the
WARNING!
buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident withdraw any slack in the belt.
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
headliner.
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
etc.).
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
downward to help position the belt away from your
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
63
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an- you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem- it is locked in position.
bly.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Adjustable Anchorage
Driver
N/A
ALR
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
Cinch
• N/A — Not Applicable
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
restrained in the rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- the entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is availMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinalocking mode.
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
65
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If
Equipped
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
67
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
2
AHR In Reset Position
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
into the back decorative plastic half.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. If the driver or front
seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will chime once and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to
the 96 second warning sequence.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins within 60 sec- the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
onds of the vehicle speed over 5 mph (8 km/h), by secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will
dealer or by following these steps:
continue for 96 seconds or until the respective seat belts
are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective 60 seconds of the ignition switch being cycled to the
seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all ON/RUN position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recomother occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat mend deactivating BeltAlert威.
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, buckle the NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
driver’s seat belt.
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with
2. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Lock Out
Light to turn off.
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
three times, ending with the seat belt buckled. This must
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
be completed within 60 seconds of cycling the ignition to
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
the ON/RUN position.
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
4. Cycle the ignition to the OFF position. A single chime
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
will sound to signify that you have successfully comthe best way to keep the baby safe.
pleted the programming.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while reKeep the belt low so that it does not come across the
buckling the seat belt.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure. the force if there is an accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
73
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 2 — Knee Bolster
vanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Knee Impact Bolster
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
(SABIC)
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
75
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags may provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the
outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
The system includes side impact sensors that are caliSupplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll- require air bag occupant protection.
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
WARNING!
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
NOTE:
The area where the side curtain air bag is located
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
should remain free from any obstructions.
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
vehicle may deploy.
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
required for this vehicle.
Knee Impact Bolster
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
passenger side front passenger by positioning the pasBased on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
senger for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
Air Bags.
bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee the severity and type of impact.
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecSide air bags also work with seat belts to improve
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
occupant protection.
collisions depending on the severity and type of collision.
Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the
risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending
on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air
Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
79
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located
in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag. The trim cover separates and folds out of the way
allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag
fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through
small vent holes in the side of the air bag.
81
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
Inflator Units
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air
bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
83
If A Deployment Occurs
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
85
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
approximate four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
86
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
wer e buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
87
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
Infants And Small Children
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly children from newborn size to the child almost large
buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics, enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
seats rather than in the front.
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
WARNING!
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger air
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder injury or death to infants in this position.
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Older Children And Child Restraints
(LATCH)”.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
89
An aftermarket belt-positioning booster seat is for chil- • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
dren weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still
slouching can move the belt out of position.
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belts. If the
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback,
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and use both the lap and shoulder belt. Never allow a
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
shoulder belt.
their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canacomfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webover the front of the seat when their back is against the
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
90
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the
installation instructions that are provided with the child
restraint system.
In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on
the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more
easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat.
91
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is
equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child
restraint anchorage systems are installed on all second-row
seats and in the center position on all third row fold-in-floor
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seats. Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages, • If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child
Installing the Lower Attachments:
restraint tether anchor at the center seating position.
1. The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located
NOTE:
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being
used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach
of children. It is recommended that before installing the
child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is
tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child
restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint
belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat
belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
should not be played with, and never leave your child
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
unattended in the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
93
NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap
and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so
the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle
seat and child restraint.
3. Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to
the vehicle’s lower anchor bars. Ensure that the lower
attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is
secure.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages
Shown)
4. Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly pushing the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower attachment
straps. Reference the child restraint instructions for information on properly removing slack.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint
attachment straps (reference the child restraint seat instructions) to ease the installation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the Top Tether Strap (with either Lower
Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt):
1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head
restraint between the steel posts.
2. Provide enough slack (reference child restraint instructions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor
located near the bottom of the seat back.
3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure that the hook
is firmly engaged and secure.
4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured,
regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the
lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row
Anchorage Shown)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
95
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle
Seat Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure
a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts
are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if
you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then
allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional
information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
description under “Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Posi- then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
tions” section. The chart below defines the seating posi- retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
tions with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
cinching latch plate.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
Driver
Center
Passenger
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
CRS Lock CRS Lock
CRS Lock
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
Second Row
ALR
N/A
ALR
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
Third Row
ALR
Cinch
ALR
1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate,
• N/A — Not Applicable
first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to route it through the belt path of the child
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
hear a “click.”
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next, pull it tight if necessary.
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
97
WARNING!
NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in
a vehicle without rear seats. In an accident, serious
injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger airbag.
REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (COMMERCIAL
VEHICLES ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
98
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether • The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weighanchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
ing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one year
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forwardold. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A
facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DEstrap.
LETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger airbag. In an accident, a passenger airbag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
• The forward-facing child seat is for children from
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
old.
• A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearwardfacing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE
INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE
Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat
EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEADelete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)
TURE (Commercial Vehicles Only). When a convertThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
ible seat is properly installed facing forward, the
children from newborn size to the child almost large
vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
position.
correct for your child:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat
with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them
or under their arm.
99
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
Tether Installation for Commercial Vehicles with
Rear Seat Delete
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
condition that might affect the performance of the strap is
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized dealrear of the front passenger seat.
ership for a replacement part.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
100
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
threads. If these or any other condition that might
affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result.
Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement
part.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interDrive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). preted as an indication of difficulty.
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
101
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
102
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make Vehicle
sure that all windows are closed and the climate control
Seat Belts
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
recirculation mode.
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is or retractor condition, replace the belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the comAir Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
103
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
104
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
105
2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 113
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 114
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . 117
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 117
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 118
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Outside Mirror Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 116
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 127
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . 133
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 134
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Stow ’n Go威 Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . 139
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . 152
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped . . . 153
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 165
▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . 166
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 166
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 167
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 173
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 178
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Windshield Wiper And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
. . . . . . 176
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 182
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Enabling/Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 188
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 193
䡵 Overhead Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Front Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . 194
▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . 196
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 201
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Opening The Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . 205
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
111
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . 207
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Super Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Premium Console Cupholders —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . 217
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Super Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . 219
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Second Row Seat Storage Bins —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Rear Load-Leveling System — If Equipped . . . 234
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
115
Outside Mirror Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three
detent positions: full forward, full rearward and normal.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Power Mirror Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Driver’s side power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the ElecThese mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elecfeature is activated whenever you turn on the rear tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customerwindow defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- Instrument Panel” for further information.
ther information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
117
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
3
NOTE: Pressing the power folding mirror switch for
more than four seconds, or if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h) will disable the folding feature.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Illuminated Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
119
3
Sensor Locations
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
BSM Warning Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including radio muting.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
the appropriate visual alert only.
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
the radio is muted.
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is reWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approstatus is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
chime.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
127
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR
located on the radio or steering wheel
button
controls (if equipped).
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle Manual located on the DVD for further details.
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
vehicle.
Uconnect™ Phone is a hands-free system that allows you
to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in
WARNING!
your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect™ Phone button
on the radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped) • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
and follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone.
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
or killed.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
129
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
Power Lumbar Switch
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
the lumbar support.
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
131
programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
below the climate controls.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat and Heated Steering Wheel can be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
side door handle trim panels.
Heated Seat Switch
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
133
Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
Manual Seat Adjuster
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Manual Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Push Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
3
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
(Continued) restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
Head Restraints — Third Row
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Stow ’n Go姞 Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Push Button
Second Row Stow ’n Go威
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push 2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
downward on the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the 5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on
armrests are raised.
the outboard side of the seat.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin
latch to open the cover.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
3
Automatic Folding Seatback
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy
storage.
Seat In Storage Bin
7. Close the storage bin cover.
Tumbled Second Row Seat
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
To Unstow Second Row Seats
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position.
Stow ’n Go威 Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
and seatback and tumble seat forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
Raising The Head Restraint
Raising The Seatback
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble
seat forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow ’n Go威 seats allow easy entry to the entry into the third row.
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
Quad Seats — If Equipped
Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
Manual Seat Adjuster
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
3
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Fold-Flat Quad Seat
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Entry
The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into
the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,
lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
the seat and lift the seat forward.
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.
Easy Entry Lever
Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
To provide additional space behind the second row seats, Pull out the retainer strap from the sewn-in pocket
the seats can be folded forward.
located on the base of the seat cushion.
With the seat in its fold-flat position, pull upward on the
easy-access release lever and lift the seat into the desired
position.
3
Retainer Strap
Fold-Flat Release Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the strap around the grab handle located on the Secure the retainer strap to the inside grab handle located
B-Pillar. Before securing the strap, adjust the buckle for on the B-Pillar. When not in use, store the strap in the
proper fit.
sewn-in pocket located on the base of the seat cushion.
B-Pillar Grab Handle
Retainer Strap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury:
• Retainer strap must always be securely attached to
grab handle when seat is folded forward and
vehicle is moving.
• Never occupy the seat or the center seat behind a
seat that has been folded forward.
Removal
The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is
needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift the
cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
latches.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
Cross Beam for Seat Removal
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
removable for added cargo space.
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out威 Rollers.
Second Row Bench Seat
Release Handles
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
WARNING!
3
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
Third Row Power Seat Switch
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
for occupant comfort.
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually NOTE:
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to • Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
the following positions using the switch bank located on
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
the left rear trim panel:
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open to Normal
3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat
2 — Stow
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both
Seats
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped 3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback seat to lower the seatback.
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head
restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
Release Strap “2”
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
157
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
3
Release Strap “3”
Release Strap “4”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Tailgate Mode
Stowed Third Row Seat
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Driver Memory Switch
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, driver’s transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, each of the memory positions.
and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.
the ON position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
transmitters.
Step 3.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sidethe ON position.
view mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
161
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position
2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
position using the other numbered Memory button or to 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
one second will occur before another recall can be
Memory Position Recall
selected.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
remove the key.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK 2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before continu1.
ing to Step 3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that ONLY)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
you are in the memory set mode.
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
vehicle.
button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
key from the ignition switch.
button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been • When you remove the key from the ignition switch, the
driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if
successfully disabled.
the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return
Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE
to its previously set position when you insert the key into
transmitter.
the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
Customer-Programmable Features⬙ in “Understanding
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
163
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
position when you insert the key into the ignition To open the hood, two latches must be released.
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the panel, below the steering column.
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Hood Release Lever
3
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety
catch downward while raising the hood at the same time.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Lever Location
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
165
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
interior lights and the fog lights.
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
position.
LIGHTS
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the
headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not remain
on. To change the timer setting, see your authorized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
will turn off in the normal manner.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the Lights-On Reminder
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter- If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled. the driver’s door is opened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Dimmer Controls
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the The dimmer switch is located to the right of the headlight
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear switch.
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
headlight switch control knob. Pressing the headDimmer Control
light switch control knob in a second time will turn the
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
front fog lights off.
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lighting On
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the
dimmer control is in this position.
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the dimmer control to the off position (extreme
Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the
is opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is doors or liftgate are open.
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
extreme top.
Rotate the dimmer control to the first detent. This feature
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi- brightens the odometer, radio and overhead displays
mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds when the parking lights or headlights are on.
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
Halo Lights — If Equipped
one of the following occur:
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
• Any overhead reading light is left on
The Halo control switch is located to the right of the
dimmer switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
3
Halo Control
To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo
switch control upward or downward to increase or decrease the lighting.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the:
• Turn Signals
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Headlight Beams Low/High
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
operation.
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Flash-To-Pass
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
defective.
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
Turn Signal Warning
remain on until the lever is released.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
171
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
position and the headlight switch in any position other
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
3
Washer And Wiper Controls
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc- and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper/
washer control lever to one of the first five detents to
select the desired delay interval.
• At driving speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay
can be regulated from a maximum of approximately
18 second between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every
one second (fifth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the
second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interNOTE:
val previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
• If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
delay times will be doubled.
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
173
Mist Feature
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward
the steering column) to the first detent and release for a
single wiping cycle.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
feature.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
Rear Wiper And Washer
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operarear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermitwiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
tent interval.
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent when not using the system.
wiper speed only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windthe vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
shield.
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
freezing.
may reduce rain sensor performance.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transthrough the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandthe wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
175
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
3
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
1 — Locked Position
2 — Unlocked Position
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
steering column in position, push the lever upward until or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
fully engaged.
warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
177
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater
range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat
Vehicle” for further information.
position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and
clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from the
WARNING!
driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin The switch is located on the left side of the steering column.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
179
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
right side of the steering wheel.
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inspeed and on level ground before pressing the SET crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
button.
increase until the button is released, then the new set
To Deactivate
speed will be established.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
181
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
182
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense姞 Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Prochanged to the ON/RUN position.
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerposition, the system will remain active until the vehicle
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inspeed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
strument Panel” for further information.
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
183
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense姞 Display
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
3
Park Assist System ON
ParkSense威 Warning Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist System Off
Slow Tone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
185
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Arcs
Park Assist
System ON
None
Radio Mute
No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled through the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
187
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
When ParkSense威 is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in EVIC after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free
REVERSE.
from snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, see your
authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the • When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
key.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam- • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
age the sensors.
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
sounding a tone.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operat• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
ing properly.
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the EVIC.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
189
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift
lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on
the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear License plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
191
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
(Continued) 3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
193
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiv“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key and pressing the eling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door switches and an
“save” soft-key.
optional power liftgate switch.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
above except sunglass storage.
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead console model features a LED focused light that
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Overhead Console
3
194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door latch to open the
compartment.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Over Door Latch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
195
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
3
Conversation Mirror Position
NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by door can only be closed.
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, To return to the full open position, the door must first be
positioned for conversation mirror use.
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
Full Open Position
release.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
196
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Reading Lights
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
197
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Overhead Compartment Features
1
2
3
4
1
— DVD 1
— Rear HVAC
— Interior Lights
— Storage
If equipped, otherwise storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD 1
Interior Lights
Halo Lighting
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink姞
199
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the and handheld transmitter buttons.
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage open and close while you train.
when programming.
NOTE:
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
200
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to “Programming
A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
201
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
button. The name and color of the button may vary by Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmanufacturer.
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed time-out in the same manner.
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
activates, programming is complete.
door or gate motor.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld transTo program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, mitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has successrepeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
erase the channels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
at this time.
release the button.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with ProgramHomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed Security
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, in your vehicle.
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
used at any time.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
erased.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
follow these steps:
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
203
Troubleshooting Tips
General Information
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
are some of the most common solutions:
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
operation.
to plug it back in?
NOTE:
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
205
automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During
Express Close operation, any movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
Opening The Sunroof — Manual Mode
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward forward again.
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
Pinch Protect Feature
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obrearward again.
struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically reClosing Sunroof — Express
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half the switch forward and release to Express Close.
second, and the sunroof will close automatically from
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
any position. The sunroof will close fully and then stop
Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a
Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
to move toward the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Sunshade Operation
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
the glass panel.
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
207
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Instrument Panel Outlets
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 cigar
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The knob and element must be used.
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor
console outlet.
Removable Console Outlet
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it
toward the instrument panel.
209
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
3
Super Console Outlets
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or
with Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or
with Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
211
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts
DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear
trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat.
Power Inverter Outlet
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
213
To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
other low power devices requiring power up to 150
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as PlaystaPanel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
further information.
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
214
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out container to engage the cupholder retention features.
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Super Console — If Equipped
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Super Console Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
cupholders.
215
Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped
On models equipped with premium center consoles,
there are four cupholders located on the top of the
console.
3
Rear Cupholders
Premium Console Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
217
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
3
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Upper and Lower Glove Compartments
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the button, To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will handle.
automatically open.
Lower Compartment
Upper Compartment
NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock
To close the compartment door, push downward on the that is part of the compartment handle.
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
219
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
3
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of
the left front door entry scuff molding.
the second row seats. The area below the covers can be
used for storage when the second row seat is in the
upright position.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Lock⬙ position
to allow greater access to the storage bin.
Umbrella Holder
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
221
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Storage Bin
CAUTION!
NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
222
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed
and latched while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
223
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
224
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and
Super.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
225
3. Remove the console.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
easily pass through the first row to the second.
higher than the rear).
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
hook.
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
is centered on the winch hole.
bin.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
cover plug.
the console base.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
226
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
• Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
Premium Console — If Equipped
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
• Rear occupant accessible
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
• Multiple adjustments
bin offers multiple configurations.
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean- • Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
The top and center console sections slide forward and
cups or mugs with handles.
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
• Top tray storage
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
227
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
and a convenient storage tray.
storage area below.
3
Console Position 1
Console Position 2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
228
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dual Storage Bins
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
Console Position 4
Console Position 3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
229
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
To Remove The Premium Floor Console
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To reinstall the console:
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
Super Console — If Equipped
higher than the front).
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin
and rear pull out drawer.
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
230
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The super console contains a pass through storage area
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
Super Console
Front Lower Pass Through
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing
down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
slides rearward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
231
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding CARGO AREA FEATURES
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rechargeable Flashlight
Located in the back of the super console is a storage The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side
of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that
recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle
is either running or the key is in the accessory position.
Rear Drawer Storage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
232
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Press And Release
Three-Press Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
233
CAUTION!
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
234
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level maximum vehicle load capacity.
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
235
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
3
Deploying the Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Loosening Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
236
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Deployed Position
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
Stowed Position
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
237
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align
any two of the three deploy positions.
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the
crossbars into the deployed positions.
3
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
238
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars
thumb screws completely.
first, with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops.
Tightening Crossbar
Stowing the Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking
care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are
identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the
crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Rail Tie Loops
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
239
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten thumb screws as necessary.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
• The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the load
and the roof surface.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
240
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
241
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
top of the window.
base sill.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 248
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 249
䡵 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ CMTC Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . 277
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 277
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 286
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 294
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 295
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 305
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 305
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 310
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
245
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Three-Zone Temperature Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 316
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped . . 330
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 321
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ A/C Air Filter— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Vents
— Instrument Cluster
— Shift Lever
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
Climate Controls
DVD – If Equipped
9 — Storage Bin
10 — Cup Holders
11 — Switch Bank
12 — Ignition Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
13 — Hood Release
14 — Dimmer Switch
15 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
247
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
249
If the vehicle is driven 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to
1. Tachometer
turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the 5. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headaccelerator.
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
lights are on.
6. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If
This indicator will illuminate when the park
Equipped
lights or headlights are turned on.
Odometer
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
CRUISE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control On
LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
LoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area
located in the instrument cluster.
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
251
CHAngE OIL
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer dis- Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
play will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
gASCAP
12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
dependent upon your personal driving style.
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
the vehicle is started.
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
noFUSE
release the Trip / Odometer Display reset button on the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomperform the following steps.
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
within 10 seconds.
— If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display — If
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
Equipped
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC), the display provides the outside temperamay stay on for as long as four seconds.
ture, one of eight compass headings to indicate the
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
direction the vehicle is facing, and the current radio
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
station. For further information, refer to “Compass Miniis not functioning and that service is required. However,
Trip Computer”.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
253
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
Equipped
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
should be checked monthly when cold and
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
tires.)
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operailluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using requent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
monitors engine and automatic transmission conto continue to function properly.
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
255
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
WARNING!
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system. If this light remains on after several ignition 11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
trol (ESC) is off.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
12. Speedometer
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicates vehicle speed.
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to 13. Fuel Door Reminder
ON/RUN.
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
vehicle.
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds 14. Fuel Gauge
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
that caused the ESC activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
257
Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on
15. Air Bag Warning Light
the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
information.
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxidealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
further information.
until the vehicle is disarmed.
16. Shift Lever Indicator
18. Brake Warning Light
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
This light monitors various brake functions,
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
including brake fluid level and parking brake
automatic transmission.
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
NOTE:
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK. the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
dropped below a specified level.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
259
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posiBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
tion.
20. Temperature Gauge
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
22. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
261
pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light warns of an overheated engine condiElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the • If the vehicle is equipped with the manufacturers gps
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
(Navigation Radio), the NAV system will provide the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
compass direction, and the variance and calibration
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
menus will be unavailable. The compass will perform
accurately, based on GPS signals instead of the Earth’s
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
magnetic field.
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is The Compass Mini-Trip Computer is located in the
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive disrequired and you may experience reduced performance, play (displays information on outside temperature, coman elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle pass direction, and trip information).
may require towing.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaEQUIPPED
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
NOTE:
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
• The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimi- are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
nating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
263
Should this wrench symbol display with the
letter P next to it, your Park Assist System
needs servicing. Contact an authorized dealer.
CMTC Reset Buttons
CMTC Reset Button
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel
CMTC Trip Odometer (ODO)
Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the reset. Press and release the STEP button on the steering
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button for wheel to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to
approximately two seconds.
ECO. Press and hold the RESET button while the
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
NE . . . . . . . Eight-point compass headings are displayed
reset.
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F. . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius) Trip B
AVG . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (U.S. or Metric) Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to Empty reset.
ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed Time
P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist On/Off
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings.
NOTE:
• A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
• Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell
phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Set The Variance
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTC
reset button (for approximately ten seconds) until the
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increase
the variance one step. Repeat as necessary until the
desired variance is achieved.
265
2. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately
10 seconds) until the current variance zone number is
displayed.
3. Release the RESET button, then press and hold again
for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programin one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
zone 1.
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu- ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feacompass:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the instrument cluster.
PARK position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire PSI
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• Radio Information
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
267
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and submenus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button
The SELECT button allows access to information in EVIC submenus, selects some feature
settings, and resets some EVIC features. The
EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BACK Button
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
• Remote start active — Key to Run
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Wrong Key
• Damaged Key
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Key not programmed
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
• Vehicle Not in Park
the following messages:
• Key Left Vehicle
• Key in ignition
• Key Not Detected
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
motion)
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Low Tire Pressure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor- •
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
•
• Premium TPM Service Graphic Display
•
• Turn Signal On
• RKE Battery Low
• Service Keyless System (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go,
Passive Entry - if equipped)
• LOW WASHER FLUID
• Oil Change Required
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Park Assist Disabled
269
Service Park Assist System
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not In Park
Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ conditions. When this message is displayed both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as
interference is present.
• Service Blind Spot System — This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn- • Electronic Speed Control SET
ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If
This light will turn on when the electronic
this message is present see an authorized dealer.
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “UnderEVIC White Telltale Lights
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell• Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status
tales. These telltales include:
The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating
the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the • Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
and the gear selected is displayed. For further informafuel is added.
tion on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
• Loose Gascap Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
speed control is ready. For further information,
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underinstalled, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
271
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the • Oil Pressure Warning Light
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
This light will turn on to indicate the wind- on.
shield washer fluid is low.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These • Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical chargtelltales include:
ing system. The light should come on when the
• Door Ajar
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
more doors may be ajar.
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
rized dealer.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light warns of an overheated engine condilight will come on when the ignition is first
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apturned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is to cool.
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
273
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
perform the following steps.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions display in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
start the engine.)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Average Fuel Economy
within 10 seconds.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two
seconds. Then, the history information will be erased,
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
275
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Average Fuel Economy Display
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Elapsed Time
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
EVIC.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
Trip Info
or START position.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT To Reset A Trip Function
button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons to Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
highlight one of the following functions if you want to selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button
to clear the resettable function being displayed.
reset it:
Units
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
reset.
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
Trip B
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
reset.
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
selections below:
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
277
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup differences, and provide the most accurate compass
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
then press the SELECT button.
compass must be set using the following steps.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
displayed in the EVIC.
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
EVIC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
279
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
Customer-Programmable Features (System
Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
Compass Variance Map
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, Setup” from the main menu.
then press the SELECT button.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup make your selection, press and release the SELECT
sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
select a feature form the following choices:
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Language
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
When in this display you may select one of five lanThe Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
operating information.
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll Auto Unlock Doors Exit
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français). vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
selected language.
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph Remote Unlock Sequence
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
281
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Flash Lamps with Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
showing the system has been deactivated.
setting has been selected.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, Features Of Your Vehicle.”
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkIntermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
has been selected.
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
Headlights Only)
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the the feature showing the system has been activated or the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- check-mark is removed showing the system has been
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
283
Flashers with Sliding Door
When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) — If Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. When ON
is selected, this feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert
Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot
Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights”
mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature
can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”
mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind
Spot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
285
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
of the unit’s faceplate.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Compass Variance
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
side of the radio faceplate.
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Media Center 130 (RES)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
287
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
288
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
289
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
290
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CAUTION!
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
CD player mechanism.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
SEEK Button
away and jam the player mechanism.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
can cause damage to the player.
CD and MP3 modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
291
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
RW/FF
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD file recording media and formats are limited. When
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) tions.
button works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM/FM Button
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
292
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
293
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playback of MP3 Files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
VBR bit rate.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
MPEG
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Specification Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
by the following:
48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
56, 48, 40, 32
CD-R media
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
Layer 3
to load than non-multisession discs
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
294
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
295
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
ACC position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Electronic Volume Control
Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
volume and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
Clock Setting Procedure
procedure, starting at Step 2.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
297
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
298
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Program Type
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
16-Digit Character
Display
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
299
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
Sports
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
Talk
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
Top 40
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
Weather
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
mode.
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ DISC/AUX Button
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
301
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
(Continued)
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
302
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanTIME Button
dom Play.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
tions.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
303
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
304
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following
table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are
also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz
sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Sampling
Specification Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96,
80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
40, 32, 24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
305
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
increase with more files and folders
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
306
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welTIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
come kit that contains general information, including
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
ignition is OFF).
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
307
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
calling:
mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID).
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
ESN/SID Access
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Quality
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons:
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
the radio to exit this screen.
structure or under a physical obstacle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
308
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
form of short audio mutes.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
cause intermittent reception.
button a second time.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
INFO Button
cause signal blockage.
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaOperating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail(Satellite) Mode
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
ACC position to operate the radio.
to normal display).
SEEK Buttons
RW/FF
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
direction of the arrows.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
309
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SETUP Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. following items:
MUSIC TYPE Button
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
Sirius subscription.
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
lected.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
type.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
and press and release that button. If a button is not
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type stored into pushbutton memory.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
310
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
button number will display.
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
Buttons 1 - 6
or glove compartment.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Equipped
Apple’s website for software updates.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
311
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
USB/AUX Connector Port
which is located in the center console or glove compartOnce the audio device is connected and synchronized to
ment.
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
312
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
Using This Feature
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
USB port:
Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
etc.) information on the radio display.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. USB device and display data:
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
previous track.
audio device)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
313
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
the current track.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
holding the FF >> button.
Off⬙.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 dejump backward or forward respectively, for five
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
seconds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
314
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
• Preset 1 – Playlists
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Preset 2 – Artists
315
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
316
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Streaming Audio”.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
Play Mode
music on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
317
Previous Track
• Battery-powered two-channel remote control
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
• Two remote headphones
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
• Integrated remote storage in either screen location
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse
• Three different medias can be played simultaneously
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)
current song that is playing will display info.
• Easy menu-driven functions on touch-screen radios
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
• Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating
EQUIPPED
area
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ is
• Ten different medias to choose from in each screen
available with:
(AM, FM, Sirius Radio, Sirius Backseat TV™, DVD1,
• One or two video screens
DVD2, Hard Disc Drive (HDD), AUX in radio, AUX1,
AUX2)
• Third row swivel screen — If Equipped
• Additional single-disc DVD player with two-screen
system
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
318
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The LCD screen(s) are located in the overhead compartment console.
VES™ Remote Control Location
Overhead Video Screens
NOTE: Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
319
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
320
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- wiping from center to edge.
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchCD Player
ing the disc.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
or anti-static sprays.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
after the current track begins to play.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
too high.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particufunction in this mode.
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
321
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
If Equipped
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
conditions.
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Manual Temperature Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
322
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
3. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
2. Front Blower Control
4. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
through the system in any mode you select. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start 5. Front Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
position. Blower control should be left in the ⬙ON⬙
position to allow the climate control to either warm or maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
cool the vehicle.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
6. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
323
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
7. Recirculation Control Button
Press this button to choose between outside air
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear winintake or recirculation of the air inside the
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
324
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIRCULA- • In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside odors,
TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
NOTE:
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
8. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
Press and release to change the current setting.
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times to
The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON.
indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu• In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULAlation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
325
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
9. Floor Mode Button
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
small amount through the defrost and side window seat passengers.
demist outlets.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
10. Bi-Level Mode Button
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any temperature.
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the Max A/C
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULAair goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved TION mode buttons at the same time.
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Three-Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
11. Panel Mode Button
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument front seat occupant can independently control the Heatpanel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, ing, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
and turned on or off to control airflow.
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
326
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
the front control operates all the rear functions.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operation. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when
the front control is in the PANEL mode. When the front
unit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted from
both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front
control is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflow
will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.
Manual Temperature Control
1. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear
blower speed increases as you move the control to the
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
327
4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left
for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the
rear cabin.
5. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
3. Front Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced warmer temperature settings.
through the system in any mode you select. The blower
6. Mix Mode
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
position. Blower control should be left in the ⬙ON⬙
position to allow the climate control to either warm or
cool the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
328
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
7. Front Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side • You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
time.
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
CAUTION!
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
these modes only when necessary.
the heating elements:
8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
Press this button to turn on the rear window
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
after soaking with warm water.
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
(Continued)
press the button a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
329
NOTE:
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times to
indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
9. Recirculation Control Button
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the • In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULAvehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
RECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIRbecause of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
• In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULAupon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
330
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press and release to change the current setting. conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
The indicator illuminates when ON.
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
13. Panel Mode Button
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C conAir is directed through the outlets in the instrument
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumupanel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
and turned on or off to control airflow.
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
seat passengers.
11. Floor Mode Button
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
small amount through the defrost and side window The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
demist outlets.
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
12. Bi-Level Mode Button
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
upper outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
331
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear Rear Blower Control
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
center of the vehicle.
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
REAR position do the second row seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower
2 – Rear Temperature
3 – Rear MODE
4 – Rear Climate Control Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
332
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
The rear mode selection REAR, allows the settings to be
controlled by the rear mode control knob.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headrotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
333
The Three-Zone ATC System automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air temperature,
the airflow volume, amount of outside air recirculation and
the airflow direction. This maintains a comfortable temperature, even under changing conditions.
4
• Occupants in the vehicle select Auto mode operation
and a comfort temperature setting by pressing a
button on the ATC.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
cabin, if desired.
Front ATC Panel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
334
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant.
7. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
2. Front Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.
8. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
This display shows the temperature setting for the left will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
front seat occupant.
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected.
4. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, 9. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or
5. Blower Control Display
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Rear Control Button
Provides toggle operation between front control screen
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat
occupants control over the rear climate settings.
335
14. Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
15. Rear Off Indicator
11. Rear Lock
Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC This indicates when the Rear Temperature Control syspanel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls
tem is in OFF.
12. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
16. Mode Control Button
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
17. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
336
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
18. SYNC Button
Press and release to control the temperature setting for and automatically maintain that comfort level.
both zones from the driver temperature control.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
19. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
trol. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the function automatically.
lower button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
Automatic Operation
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
1. Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC
comfort as quickly as possible.
display, along with two temperatures for the driver and
front passenger. The system will then automatically • The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
regulate the amount of airflow.
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customersystem to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passenProgrammable Features” in this Section.
ger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower knob setting
337
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control clockwise and decreases
when you move the control counterclockwise.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override Blower Control
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
manual mode.
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
the temperature doors will continue to operate automatiAuto mode.
cally.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
338
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Panel Mode
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
air is directed through the defrost and side window
and turned on or off to control airflow.
demister outlets.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center Mix Mode
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
seat passengers.
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortBi-Level Mode
able, while keeping the windshield clear.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is Defrost Mode
also directed through the side window demister outlets.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxiNOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mum blower and temperature settings for best windmode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
shield and side window defrosting.
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
339
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
RECIRCULATION mode should only be used temporarily. A LED will illuminate on the RECIRCULATION
control button when RECIRCULATION mode is selected.
Push the button a second time to turn off the RECIRCUNOTE:
LATION mode LED and allow outside air into the
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
vehicle.
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATION
mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RE• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIX
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
these modes are selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
340
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
center of the vehicle.
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
panel located on the instrument panel.
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed
2 - Rear Temperature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3 - Rear MODE
4 - Rear Temperature Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
341
1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front NOTE:
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
in the rear temperature knob.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
comfort as quickly as possible.
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
counterclockwise to AUTO.
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — CustomerOnce the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
Programmable Features” in this Section.
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
Rear Blower Control
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
system to function automatically.
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
342
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
Headliner Mode
Rear Temperature Control
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperaside will shut off the airflow.
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
Bi-Level Mode
front ATC panel.
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
343
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL Winter Operation
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functionliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concenFloor Mode
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode
Summer Operation
during Winter months is not recommended, because it
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles may cause window fogging.
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
Vacation/Storage
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
344
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Operating Tips
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
DEFROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
345
A/C Air Filter— If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 355
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Fuel Economy (Econ) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 357
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 381
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation . . . 388
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 373
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 391
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
349
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 409
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 397 䡵 Flexible Fuel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 398
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 415
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 418
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave unattended children alone in a vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
351
Normal Starting
1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release it as
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure (Steps 1–3
above).
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
Automatic Transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
pressed to shift out of PARK.
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or –29°C)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If The Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued) If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the
engine for more than 15–second intervals at one time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
353
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
have enough power to continue running when the key standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the grounded, three-wire extension cord.
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
running smoothly.
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15– Module.
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
be repeated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
WARNING!
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Move the shift lever into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not move the shift lever from REVERSE,
PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when
the engine is above idle speed.
• Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make
sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Once the key fob
is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
This system prevents the key fob from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents moving
the shift lever out of PARK, unless the key fob is in the
ACC/ON position, and the brake pedal is pressed.
355
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
ECON mode is engaged.
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will be able to change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
• The torque converter clutch will engage sooner (lower
engine rpm’s) and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
357
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F (-23°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only third gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
Shift Lever
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section). Moving the lever to the left or
right (–/ +) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
Do not race the engine when moving the shift lever from
PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this gear.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this gear.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the
key fob from the ignition switch, and apply the
parking brake. Once the key is removed from the
ignition, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob
in the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
359
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have placed the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When moving the shift lever into PARK, firmly move
the lever all the way forward until it stops.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the instrument
cluster to ensure the shift lever is in the PARK position.
• When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the shift lever rearward without moving the shift lever
to the right.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition switch from LOCK to ON so the
shift lever is released. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, when frequent transmission shifting occurs, such as when operating the
NEUTRAL
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly
This range is used when vehicle is standing for proterrain, traveling into strong head winds or while towing
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
mode to select the “5” range. Under these conditions,
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
using the “5” range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
WARNING!
and heat buildup.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
you to move the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) when
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, this allows the
vehicle and have a collision.
selection of the desired top gear. For example, if you shift
the transmission into third gear, the transmission will
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
never shift above third gear, but can shift down into
second or first gear automatically, when needed.
Switching from ERS to DRIVE can be done at any vehicle
speed. To shift from DRIVE mode to ERS mode, move the
shift lever to the left (-) once. The current gear will be
maintained as the top gear. To disable ERS, simply press
and hold the shift lever to the right (+) until “D” is
displayed in the instrument cluster odometer.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Odometer
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
361
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Reset Mode – Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into third
gear. The transmission remains in third gear despite the
forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL
will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
Acceleration
following steps:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
1. Stop the vehicle.
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
2. Shift into PARK.
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Restart the engine.
WARNING!
5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
layer of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
363
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
365
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticidoes not in any way damage the steering system.
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoWARNING!
rized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
367
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
Parking Brake
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
When
the
parking
brake
is applied with the ignition
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
switch
in
the
ON
position,
the
“Brake Warning Light” in
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
the
instrument
cluster
will
illuminate.
disengage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
369
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into anti-lock:
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves
• Brake pedal pulsations
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed, or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
371
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). These systems complement the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake braking capability during emergency braking maneusystem should be serviced as soon as possible to restore vers.
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
repaired as soon as possible.
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded.
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
373
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
ESC Operating Modes
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
• ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch.
375
Off” mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC Activation/ • When in “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When
in the “Partial Off” mode, ESC will operate without
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
engine torque management. This mode is intended to be
ESC OFF Indicator Light
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would norLight” in the instrument cluster will come on
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will
position. It should turn off with the engine
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
NOTE:
• To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- NOTE:
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momendiagnosed and corrected.
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acwhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
that caused the ESC activation.
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
377
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designastandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
379
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
380
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
381
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
382
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
383
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuInformation placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
of this manual.
on your vehicle’s placard.
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
384
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
(392 kg).
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
385
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
386
STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
387
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, and
the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal properly inflated, even when they are under-inflated.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
CAUTION!
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, alconsumption.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
388
STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original-equipment information, or an
the Winter.
authorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operating
Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High-speed driving, with your vehicle at or above
maximum load, is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
389
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
390
STARTING AND OPERATING
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo- Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare 80D18 103M.
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. wheel on the vehicle at any given time
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
391
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
392
STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h),
or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stopping.
WARNING!
• Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone.
• Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 seconds
continuously, when you are stuck; and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
393
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors, including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
394
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manuequivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivasafety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Please see “Tread Wear
Indicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placard
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
395
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
396
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Use chains on P225/65R16 tires only. P225/65R17
tires do not provide adequate clearance.
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
0.5 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer, if different from the speed recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
(Continued) chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
chains.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
397
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the checked before using these tire types.
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only different loads and perform different steering, driving,
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
safety and handling of your vehicle.
unequal rates.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
398
STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements
found on the tire placard located on the driver’s-side
B-pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be turned off. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
399
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only
after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
400
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
401
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
the tire.
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
Base System
⬙TIRE LOW PRESSURE⬙ message will display
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levwill be activated when one or more of the four active
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
Module.
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value (located
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain on the placard on the driver’s-side B-Pillar). The system
the proper pressure.
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
tire pressures have been received.
• Receiver Module
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
402
STARTING AND OPERATING
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a ⬙TIRE LOW PRESSURE⬙ message will be dis1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
played and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
will turn on.
sensors.
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
that affects radio wave signals.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around solid.
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.
403
The Premium TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four TPMS Sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics displaying tire pressures
Premium System – If Equipped
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
404
STARTING AND OPERATING
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five
seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) flashing.
Low Tire Pressure Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
405
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic Sensor(s) is not being received.
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Display
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
406
STARTING AND OPERATING
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message is then followed by a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
that affects radio wave signals.
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
in the compact spare tire.
the wheels or wheel housings.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
⬙TIRE LOW PRESSURE⬙ message will be displayed, a
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
flashing pressure value in the graphic display.
Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following scenarios:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure
407
value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is
below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
408
STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
following licenses:
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4 before considering service for the vehicle.
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
3.6L Engine
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
This engine is designed to meet all emis- and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomsions regulations and provide excellent mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifuel economy and performance when us- fications if they are available.
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use Reformulated Gasoline
of premium gasoline is not recommended, Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spethese engines.
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to prove air quality.
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
409
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
410
STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• change the engine oil and oil filter
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
411
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
412
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un(Continued)
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
413
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
5
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
414
STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
15% unleaded gasoline.
than 1/4 full
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with • When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
following start up even if the above recommendations
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
are followed.
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
415
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
416
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
Fuel Filler Cap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
417
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
418
STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may If the problem continues, the message will appear the
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front
419
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
WARNING!
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
Tire Size
GVWR.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
420
STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
Overloading
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
listed.
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
Inflation Pressure
and rear GAWR.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
Curb Weight
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
it is not over the GVWR.
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight separately. It is important that you distribute the load
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a evenly over the front and rear axles.
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
added.
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
421
Loading
CAUTION!
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. your vehicle.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way TRAILER TOWING
the brakes operate.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
422
STARTING AND OPERATING
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing-related definitions will as- fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
sist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temrear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certificaporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
ready for operation⬙ condition.
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
423
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
hitch is the most popular on the market today and they
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
trailers.
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
Weight-Distributing Hitch
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverFrontal Area
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
424
STARTING AND OPERATING
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with an authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer
or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING
425
5
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
426
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory-equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See an authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Max. GTW
Class
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
427
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Max. Tongue
Wt.)
Wt.
Up
to
2
persons
&
Luggage
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
180 lbs (82 kg)
1,800 lbs (816 kg)
3 to 5 persons & Luggage
3.6L/Automatic 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
135 lbs (61 kg)
1,350 lbs (612 kg)
6 to 7 persons & Luggage
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
100 lbs (45 kg)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Up to 2 persons & Luggage
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
360 lbs (163 kg)
3,600 lbs (1 633 kg)*
3.6L/Automatic
3 to 5 persons & Luggage
(with Tow Pack- 8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
335 lbs (152 kg)
3,350 lbs (1 519 kg)*
age)
6 to 7 persons & Luggage
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
300 lbs (136 kg)
3,000 lbs (1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Frontal Area
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
428
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side,
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire Safety Information/Tire
and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
429
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Towing Requirements
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
train components, the following guidelines are recom- GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
430
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a injury collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weight
as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements – Tires
431
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operpersonal injury.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
432
STARTING AND OPERATING
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
433
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.
5
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
434
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, move the shift
lever into fifth gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Moving the shift lever into fifth gear while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
435
NOTE:
Cooling System
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level before To reduce potential for engine and transmission overtowing.
heating, take the following actions:
• The transmission is sealed and requires an authorized • City Driving
dealer to check the transmission fluid.
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed Reduce speed.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
• Air Conditioning
you can get back to cruising speed.
Turn off temporarily.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
436
STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle (flattowing with all four wheels on the ground) is not
recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Securing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut . . . . . 441
▫ Spare Tire Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
438
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
439
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
6
440
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Jack And Tool Location
Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
handle, and tools.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console.
441
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
6
Spare Tire Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
442
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Super Console
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare tire console.
winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the console.
Lower Drawer
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
443
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compart- Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to
ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
access the winch drive nut.
6
Drive Nut Access
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
444
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Tools
The spare tire pouch contains three pieces and can be
assembled into a Winch T-handle or Spare Tire Hook.
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
Assembled T-handle
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
445
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the
center console area.
cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
6
Spare Tire And Cover
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
446
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a “T”
and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut, refer to
“Assembling The Spare Tire Hook” graphic in “Spare
Tire Tools”. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch
mechanism stops turning freely. This will allow enough
slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out
from under the vehicle.
Pulling Spare Tire
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
447
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the Preparations For Jacking
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
slippery areas.
release it from the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
Removing Wheel Spacer
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
448
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
449
CAUTION!
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
450
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
of the vehicle body.
Jack Location
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
451
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Jack Locations
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is securely engaged.
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle.
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
the vehicle.
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
452
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
• Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
• Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel
covers.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
correct wheel nut tightness is 102 ft lbs (138 N·m). If in
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
nuts.
service station.
WARNING!
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
453
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
back in the stowage compartment.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly. in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the fullsized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
a “T” and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism
clicks at least three times.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally, to
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or
the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torque is 102 ft lbs (138 N·m).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
454
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Securing The Spare Tire
CAUTION!
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops
turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the
vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the
vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the
wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the two
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on
the opposite side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle
control.
455
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other
full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
456
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
457
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
458
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Jump-Starting Procedure
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
459
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
460
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forth
between DRIVE and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when starting
off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) to “Partial
Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
461
2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located
near the top right of the shift lever in the instrument
panel.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
462
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position 6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
without starting the engine.
7. The vehicle may then be started in the NEUTRAL
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. position.
5. Using a small screwdriver or similar small, push and
hold the override release lever forward.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
ALL MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
Wheel lift
Flatbed
Rear
Front
ALL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
• 25 mph (40 km/h)max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
463
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not
the LOCK or ACC positions.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is
operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
(Continued)
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
464
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• The towing distance to be traveled must not exceed Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
15 miles (24 km).
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipbe towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than ment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe transmission damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 468
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
466
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker
And Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . 499
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 499
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 512
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 508
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
467
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
468
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
469
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Unnance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaIndicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight- on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
ened.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
470
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
a normal bulb check.
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will may then indicate that the system is now ready.
happen:
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
471
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
472
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
473
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
been certified by the American
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
Change Engine Oil
API Certified engine oils.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
474
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
“Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
for further information.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certificaenvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
should not be used.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic Engine Oils
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
475
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
maintenance intervals.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
476
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
477
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
478
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
479
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
480
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer, or other
authorized service facility, using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
481
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter the housing.
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
Windshield Wiper Blades
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubriwindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaMOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
tions of salt or road film.
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
removed. Particular attention should also be given to from a dry windshield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
483
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesfew minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
sary.
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR威 All
Adding Washer Fluid
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals. and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
484
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Coolant Checks
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
485
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
486
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
Adding Coolant
anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintewill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine cooling system.
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainvehicle.
tain the proper level of protection against freezing acPlease review these recommendations for using Hybrid cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant the vehicle is operated.
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
487
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
488
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature
is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
489
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
the condenser clean.
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
against freezing.
mileage, and increased emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle Brakes
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
maintenance intervals.
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
490
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainMaster Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
491
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
492
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami- transmission to assure optimum transmission perfornate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transbe damaged, causing partial or complete brake mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
failure. This could result in a collision.
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainAutomatic Transmission
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transcontained within a single housing.
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
WARNING! (Continued)
The six–speed transmission is equipped with a capped
dipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered
with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to
ensure that the fluid level is set properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
493
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The six-speed automatic transmission is a sealed unit and
has no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the
transmission fluid checked or serviced.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
494
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
• Stone and gravel impact
• Insects, tree sap and tar
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
completely with clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumuresistance built into your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
495
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open.
finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
CAUTION!
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
the owner.
paint and decals.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
496
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
ner:
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
remove soap residue.
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or • For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
towel to remove soap residue.
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective
finish.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
497
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
498
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight right rear quarter window equipped with the radio
and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head- antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Glass Surfaces
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
rag.
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abra- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
499
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
with a clean soft cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if
Installation
the buckles do not work properly.
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
corresponding openings in the drawer.
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting FUSES
at one edge to ease removal.
Totally Integrated Power Module
Cleaning
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the applithe cleaning procedure below.
cable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
500
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A
label that identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Integrated
Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Totally Integrated Power Module
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
40 Amp
—
Power Folding Seat
Green
30 Amp
—
Power Liftgate ModPink
ule
30 Amp
—
Rear Door Module
Pink
(RR Door Node)
25 Amp
—
Driver Door Node
Natural
25 Amp
—
Passenger Door
Natural
Node
40 Amp
—
Antilock Brakes
Green
Pump/Stability Control System
Cavity
J7
J8
J9
J10
J11
J13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
501
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
30 Amp
—
Antilock Brakes
Pink
Valve/Stability Control System
40 Amp
—
Power Memory Seat
Green
– If Equipped
40 Amp
—
Partial Zero EmisGreen
sions Vehicle Motor/
Flex Fuel
30 Amp
—
Headlamp Wash
Pink
Relay/Manifold
Tuning Valve
30 Amp
—
Power Sliding Door
Pink
Module/Anti–Theft
Module Relay Lock
Feed
60 Amp
—
Ignition Off Draw
Yellow
(IOD) – Main
7
502
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
40 Amp
—
Rear Window DeGreen
fogger
30 Amp
—
Front Blower
Pink
40 Amp
—
Starter Solenoid
Green
20 Amp
—
Powertrain Control
Blue
Module Trans Range
60 Amp
—
Radiator Fan
Yellow
30 Amp
—
Front Wiper LO/HI
Pink
20 Amp
—
Front/Rear Washer
Blue
25 Amp
—
Sunroof Module
Natural
Cavity
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
15 Amp Rear Center Brake
Blue
Lamp/Brake Switch
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Spare Fuse
Yellow
—
10 Amp Trailer Tow
Red
—
25 Amp Inverter
Natural
—
20 Amp Power Outlet #1
Yellow (ACC), Rain Sensor
—
20 Amp Power Outlet #2
Yellow (BATT/ACC SELECT)
—
20 Amp Front Heated Seat –
Yellow If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M9
M10
M11
M12
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
20 Amp Rear Heated Seat –
Yellow If Equipped
—
15 Amp Ignition Off Draw —
Blue
Video System, Satellite Radio, DVD,
Hands-Free Module,
Universal Garage
Door Opener, Vanity
Lamp, Streaming
Video Module
—
10 Amp Ignition Off Draw –
Red
Climate Control System
—
30 Amp Amplifier (AMP)/
Green
Radio
Cavity
M13
M14
M15
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
503
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
20 Amp Ignition Off Draw—
Yellow Instrument Cluster,
SIREN, Clock Module, Multi-Function
Control Switch/ITM
—
20 Amp Spare Fuse
Yellow
—
20 Amp Rear View Mirror,
Yellow Instrument Cluster,
Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor,
Glow Plug Module –
Export Diesel Only,
Assy-Shifter (Hall
Effect), Acoustic
Noise Cancellation
7
504
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
10 Amp Airbag Module/
Red
Occupant Classification Module
—
15 Amp Left Tail/License/
Blue
Park Lamp, Running
Lamps
—
15 Amp Right Tail/Park/Run
Blue
Lamp
—
25 Amp Automatic ShutNatural down #1 and #2
—
15 Amp Instrument Cluster
Interior Light, Switch
Blue
Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch
Steering Wheel
—
20 Amp Automatic ShutYellow down #3
Cavity
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
10 Amp Right Horn (HI/
Red
LOW)
—
10 Amp Left Horn (HI/
Red
LOW)
—
25 Amp Rear Wiper
Natural
—
20 Amp Fuel Pump, Diesel
Yellow Lift Pump – Export
Only
—
10 Amp Power Mirror
Red
Switch, Driver Window Switch
—
10 Amp Ignition Switch,
Red
Wireless Control
Module, Keyless Entry Module, Steering
Column Lock
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
10 Amp Powertrain Control
Red
Module, Transmission Feed, Transmission Control Module
—
10 Amp Occupant ClassificaRed
tion Module
—
15 Amp Rear Wiper Module,
Blue
Power Folding Mirror, J1962 Diagnostic
Feed
—
20 Amp Back-Up Lamps
Yellow
—
10 Amp Airbag Module, TT
Red
EUROPE
—
10 Amp Powertrain Control
Red
Module, Transmission Control Module
Cavity
M34
M35
M36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
505
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
10 Amp Park Assist, Heater
Red
Climate Control System Module, Headlamp Wash, Compass, IR Sensor, Rear
Camera, Lamp Door
FT Drv/Pass, Lamp
Flashlight, AHLM,
Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Rad Fan Diesel
—
10 Amp Heated Mirrors
Red
—
20 Amp Power Outlet #3
Yellow
7
506
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M37
M38
Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
—
10 Amp Antilock Brakes, StaRed
bility Control System, Stop Lamp
Switch, Fuel Pump
Rly Hi Control
—
25 Amp Door Lock/Unlock
Natural Motors, Liftgate
Lock/Unlock Motors
The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outlet
and removable floor console, when in the front position
are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only serviceable
by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused by a
30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver’s seat. The
power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker
located under the instrument panel near the steering
column. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may do the following:
• Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off
Draw (IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
507
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb Number
Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Fog Lamp – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker, Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped . . . . . 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 194
Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966 BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
Headlamps
for replacement instructions.
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
housing.
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then
depress the tab and remove the connector from the bulb.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
508
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing.
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
into the headlamp housing.
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
CAUTION!
Fog Lamps
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air
dam.
5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red 1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb
lock tab forward.
socket and pull straight out from the fog lamp.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
509
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
disengage the two ball studs.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
lamp until it locks into place.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Backup Lamps
7
1. Raise the liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
510
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
License Lamp
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to bar and above the license plate.
scratch the paint.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull
dislodging them separately.
down on the lamp assembly for removal.
3. Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly. 2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place
lamp assembly.
ensuring the locking tab is secure.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly.
See your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
511
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
20 Gallons
76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
13.4 Quarts
12.6 Liters
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
512
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
513
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 518 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
516
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, Oil Change Required will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
NOTE:
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, CHAngE OIL will
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necesilluminated.
sary.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
517 M
A
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only I
when the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN N
T
mark.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if N
A
required.
N
At Each Stop For Fuel
E
Once A Month
C
E
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or S
C
damage.
H
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals E
D
as required.
U
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, the L
E
brake master cylinder, the power steering and the S
transmission and add as needed.
8
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
fully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oil
operation.
level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
518
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Oil Change
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Open the left and right door (slowly) and inspect for
excessive dirt. If noise exist wipe clean and apply
krytox lube to the door rollers.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
519 M
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 520 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
521 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 522 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
523 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 524 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169,00 km) or 60 months
(whichever occurs first).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
525 M
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 526 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
527 M
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 528 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
N 114 Months Maintenance Service
T
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
A ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
N
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
C
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 531
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 532
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 532
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
530
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
531
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
532
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 423–6343
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
ter should include the following information:
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
533
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
534
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
535
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
536
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need
in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
537
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
538
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
540
INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 486
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 475
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,480
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,333,479
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 325
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,340
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,81
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,85,102,257
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,78,81
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 77,78,81
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485,511
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 333
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
541
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . 100
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
. . . . . 382 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,507
. . . . . 478
. . . . . 456 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,278
. . . . . 26 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
. . . . . 171 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
. . . . . 102 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
. . . . . 118
Automatic Transaxle
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492,513
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,492,493
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492,513
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE)
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . .
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
542
INDEX
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,412
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,321
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,469
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,88,89
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,296
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,265,277
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,278
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,278
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 310
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 487
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484,488
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 485,511,512
543
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,499
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,338
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
544
INDEX
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,448
Driving
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 469
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 274 Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 317
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,101,412
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 178
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,511
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472,511,512
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,265
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473,511
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 82
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,101,412
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,476
Express Down Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
545
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,480
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475,512
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,249,508,509
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,414
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
546
INDEX
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 512
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,249,508
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,416
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260,270
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,511
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,418,468
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,28,407
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,422
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,422
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
547
. 363
. 438
. 135
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
507
498
166
170
507
166
166
116
130
321
353
170
10
548
INDEX
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
426 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
197 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
163
223 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,88 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,249
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . 91
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Hitches
Trailer Towing .
HomeLink® (Garage
Hood Release . . . .
Hook, Coat . . . . . .
...................
Door Opener) Transmitter
...................
...................
..
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,165
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,85,102,257
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
549
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 375
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,249,508
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260,270
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 254
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
550
INDEX
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . 254
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 253
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,508,509
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 249
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,418,421
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . . 91
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 254,469
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,159
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,276
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471,534
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) . . . . . . . . . . 191
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,78,83
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 76,77,78,81
551
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,252,273
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . 251,252,273
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472,512
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475,512
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473,511
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474,511
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468,469
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,114
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
552
INDEX
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 193
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260,438
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,535
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 382
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 207
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365,366
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 484,487
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,340
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 319
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . 251,252,273
553
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,91
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,101
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,102
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
554
INDEX
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 62
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,89
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 485,512
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,296
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,169,170,249,508,509
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,391,441
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365,366
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,506
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,506
555
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 72
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 333
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 259,439
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 382
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
556
INDEX
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,386,537
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,448
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,383
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 398
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,386
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Transaxle
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492,513
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,492
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492,513
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 197
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,249,508,509
UCI Connector
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . .
Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
557
127
220
537
310
197
408
497
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,278
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,418,421
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,506
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
558
INDEX
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,206
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,483
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . 325
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
Chrysler Group LLC
11Y532-126-AD
Grand Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fourth Edition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Printed in U.S.A.
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11Y532-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Caravan
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement